2006 Chevrolet Cobalt Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Lift the bar located under the front of the seat to unlock
it. Slide the seat to where you want it and release the
bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the
seat is locked in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle has this
feature, the knob is
located on the front of the
driver seat lower cushion
on the inboard side.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the lumbar support.
The driver’s seat height adjuster is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To raise the seat, move the lever upward repeatedly
until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,
move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is
at the desired height.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle may have heated front seats. The switches
are located on the instrument panel above the climate
control system.
Press the side of the
switch with the double
indicator lights to turn on
the heated seat at the
highest setting.
Driver’s Switch Shown,
Passenger’s Switch
Similar
Your vehicle has reclining seatbacks. The lever is
located on the outboard side of the seats. Lift the lever
to release the seatback. Move the seatback to where
you want it and release the lever to lock the seatback in
place. Press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked into place.
Both indicator lights will be lit to indicate that the setting
is on high. Press the side of the switch with the single
indicator light to go to the low setting. The indicator light
will be lit to indicate that the setting is on low. Return
the switch to the center to turn off the heated seat.
If your vehicle has been turned off, the last heated seat
setting will be retained when the vehicle is started again.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash, you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
Press the button on the
side of the head restraint
to adjust it.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces
the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the easy entry seat, do the following:
Easy Entry Seat (Coupe)
{CAUTION:
If the easy entry right front seat is not locked,
it can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the
person sitting there could be injured. After you
have used it, be sure to push rearward on an
easy entry seat to be sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
1. Push down the easy entry seat handle located on
the rear of the seatback on the outboard side to
release the seatback.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
2. Tilt the seatback forward completely while pushing
the seat forward.
3. Move the seatback to its original position after
someone gets into the rear seat area. Make
sure the seatback is locked.
The front passenger seat can be used to easily get in
and out of the rear seat.
4. Move the seat rearward until it locks into place.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
You can fold either side of the rear seatback down for
more cargo space.
To lower the rear seatback, follow these steps:
2. Once the handle is pulled, the seatback can be
pushed open through the trunk, or pulled open
from the inside of the vehicle.
1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of the small
handles located in the center of the trunk.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To raise the rear seatback, lift it up and push rearward
until you hear a click. Push and pull on the seatback
to be sure it is locked into place.
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
pull forward on the top of the seatback at the
area of the latch to be sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
{CAUTION:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. See Safety Belt
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding
rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Driver Position
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
To move it down, press
the release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position.
You can move the height
adjuster up just by
pushing up on the shoulder
belt guide.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both
the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the height adjuster to where you want it,
try to move it down without pressing the release button
to make sure it has locked into position.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt — except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here is
how to wear one properly.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go
back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across
you more slowly.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be
less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it,
the belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn the
guide and clip inward and slide them in between the
seatback and the interior body, leaving only the loop of
the elastic cord exposed.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the driver
and right front passenger. Although you cannot see
them, they are located on the retractor part of the safety
belts. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use
it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing child
seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet that
comes with the extender.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. It should
never be worn over the abdomen, which could
cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
Older Children
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
page 1-25. If the child is sitting in the center rear
seat passenger position, move the child toward the
safety belt buckle. In either case, be sure that
the shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,
so that in a crash the child’s upper body would have
the restraint the belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take into
consideration not only the child’s weight, height and
age but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that
is unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within the
child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then
follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions in
this manual.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
{CAUTION:
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of the
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch.
The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take
the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield
has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like
shield that swings up or to the side.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation of a
child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses anchors
in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint
that are made for use with the LATCH system
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains
how to attach a child restraint with these attachments in
your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. In the United States, some child restraints also
have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
Top Tether Anchor
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Rear Seat
Each rear seating position has two exposed metal lower
anchors in the crease between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the
trim cover.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached. There is no place to attach the top tether in
this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
The top tether anchors are located under the trim
covers on the rear seatback filler panel. Pull open the
trim cover to access the anchor. Be sure to use an
anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the
seating position where the child restraint will be placed.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in the
vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Make sure
that a LATCH-type child restraint is properly
installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this
manual.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are
using has a fixed head
restraint and you are using
a single tether, route the
tether over the head
restraint.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor trim cover to
expose the anchor.
If the position you are
using has a fixed or
adjustable head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the head restraint.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a single tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you are
using a dual tether,
route the tether over the
seatback.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way. The
safety belt will move freely again and be ready to work for
an adult or larger child passenger.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
In addition, your vehicle may have the passenger
sensing system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat
or a small child in a forward-facing child restraint or
booster seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing
this including important safety information.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far back
as it will go before securing the forward-facing child
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child restraint in this position if
a national or local law requires that the top tether be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
on page 1-41 if your child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
page 1-60. General Motors recommends that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint is
forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition to
RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag Status
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt
back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor once the
lock has been set.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have roof-mounted side impact airbags.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are available for the
driver and the passenger seated directly behind the
driver and for the right front passenger and the
passenger seated directly behind that passenger.
8. If your vehicle has a passenger sensing system and
the airbag is off, the off indicator on the instrument
panel will be lit and stay lit when the key is
turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
If your vehicle has side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on the
garnish trim near the ceiling and the side windows.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes. They
are not designed to inflate in rollover, rear
crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in the past.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
Roof-mounted side impact airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle. They
are not designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover
or in rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt properly — whether or
not there is an airbag for that person.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children
page 1-32.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
Where Are the Airbags?
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the steering wheel.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
and the person seated directly behind the driver,
it is located in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, if your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tiedown through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating side impact airbag will be blocked.
The path of an inflating airbag must be
kept clear.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the right
front passenger and the person directly behind that
passenger, it is located in the ceiling above the
side windows.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above or
below this range.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal sensor
which helps the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front
of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not
move or deform, the threshold level for the reduced
deployment is about 12 to 16 mph (19 to 26 km/h),
and the threshold level for a full deployment is about
18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are not
intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have side impact airbags.
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed threshold level.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design. Side impact airbags are not intended to inflate
in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear
impacts. A side impact airbag is intended to deploy on
the side of the vehicle that is struck.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types of
collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion is
not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including many
frontal or near frontal collisions, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded as
anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For side impact airbags,
inflation is determined by the location and severity of
the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash.
The sensing system triggers a release of gas from
the inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag modules
inside the steering wheel and in the instrument panel
in front of the right front passenger. For vehicles with
side impact airbags, there are also airbag modules in the
ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows.
side collisions for side impact airbags.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates,
so quickly that some people may not even realize the
airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags
deflate more slowly and may still be at least partially
inflated minutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Some
components of the airbag module — the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s airbag or the garnish
trim near the ceiling and the side windows— may be hot
for a short time. The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to
touch. There will be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does
not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield
or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, turn the
hazard warning flashers on and turn off the climate
control system when the airbags inflate (if battery power
is available). You can lock the doors again, turn the
interior lamps off, turn the hazard warning flashers off
and turn the climate control system on by using the
controls for those features.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
If your vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the
following illustrations, then your vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front passenger’s position.
A passenger airbag status indicator on the instrument
panel will be visible when you turn your ignition key to
START or RUN. The words ON and OFF, or the symbol
for ON and OFF, will be visible on the instrument panel
during the system check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or the
symbol for ON or the symbol for OFF will be visible.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts
for your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
United States
Canada
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags (if equipped)
are not part of the passenger sensing system.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat and
safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the passenger’s frontal airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in the rear seat, even if the
airbag is off.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.”
This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is
so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure
that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in a
rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check
with your dealer.
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator on the
instrument panel will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that
person and then enable the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
important safety information.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the passenger
sensing system. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle.
Your dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s seat
or between the passenger’s seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the proper
{CAUTION:
operation of the passenger sensing system.
For up to 20 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the center console), or the
instrument panel can affect the operation of
the airbag system. If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
page 7-2.
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
page 7-2.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering (if equipped) on the garnish
trim near the ceiling and the side windows, the airbag
may not work properly. You may have to replace the
airbag module in the steering wheel, both the airbag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s airbag, or the side impact airbag module
and the garnish trim near the ceiling and the side
windows for roof-mounted side impact airbags
(if equipped). Do not open or break the airbag
coverings.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move.
The children or others could be badly injured
or even killed. Do not leave the keys in a
vehicle with children.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer who can
obtain the correct key code. See Roadside Assistance
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to
for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes
the key tag from the key and gives it to the first owner.
Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the
tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you will be able
to have a new one made easily using the tag.
If the vehicle has the keyless entry system, it operates
on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
1. This device may not cause interference.
If your vehicle has this feature, the vehicle’s doors can
be locked and unlocked, and the trunk can be
unlocked from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 60 feet (18 m)
away with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If you notice a decrease in the operating range of the
page 2-3 for information regarding conditions which may
affect the transmitter’s performance.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
The following functions are
available with the remote
keyless entry system.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to
the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and try
again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If enabled through the DIC, and it is dark enough
outside, the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps and parking
lamps will come on each time the unlock button on the
transmitter is pressed. These exterior lamps will stay on
for 20 seconds, or until a door is opened. See “EXT
(Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
on page 3-42.
Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the remote lock feedback can be programmed to
have the horn chirp and/or the parking lamps flash when
the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the
vehicle’s doors. See “LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH”
more information.
Pressing the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter will disarm the content-theft deterrent
more details.
Pressing the lock button may arm the content
page 2-14.
V (Remote Trunk Release): The trunk will open
when this button on the transmitter is pressed and held
for approximately one second. You can open the trunk
with the transmitter when the vehicle is stationary.
" (Unlock): Press the unlock button one time to unlock
the driver’s door. Press the unlock button again within
five seconds to unlock the other doors. The interior
lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until
the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC,
the remote unlock feedback can be programmed to have
the horn chirp and/or the turn signal lamps flash when
the remote keyless entry transmitter is used to unlock
the vehicle’s doors. See “UNLOCK HORN” and “LIGHT
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
this button to help locate your vehicle. The horn will
sound three times and the hazard lamps will flash
three times. Press and hold the button for three seconds
to sound the panic alarm. The horn will sound and the
hazard lamps will flash for 30 seconds. The ignition must
be off for the vehicle locator/remote alarm to work.
Press the vehicle locator/panic alarm button again or
turn the ignition to ACC (Accessory) or RUN to turn off
the alarm.
page 3-42 for more information.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is uniquely coded
to prevent another transmitter from unlocking the
vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased through your GM dealer. Remember
to bring any additional transmitters with you when
you go to your dealer. The vehicle can have a maximum
of four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in the remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work, at the normal range, in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery. The KEY FOB
BATT LOW message in the vehicle’s DIC will display,
if the remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low.
To replace the battery do the following:
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the notch,
located below the Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm
button, and pry the front and back apart.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a metal
object to do this.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the
positive side of the battery facing up. Use a type
CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doors and Locks
CAUTION: (Continued)
Door Locks
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly and
lock the doors whenever you drive.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To lock the driver’s door from the outside, turn the
key clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the key
counterclockwise.
CAUTION: (Continued)
You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter,
if equipped, to lock and unlock the doors.
From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on each
door or the power door lock switch to lock and unlock
all doors.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Door Locks
Delayed Locking
If your vehicle has power locks, it will have the delayed
locking feature.
Your vehicle may have
power door locks. If so,
they are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door armrest.
This feature will delay the actual locking of the doors for
up to five seconds when the power door lock switch
or remote keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the
vehicle.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle,
three chimes will sound signaling that the delayed
locking feature is active. Five seconds after the last
door is closed, all of the doors will lock and the
turn signal lamps will flash. To cancel the delay and
lock the doors immediately, press the lock button
a second time.
Driver’s Switch shown,
Front Passenger’s
Switch similar
This feature will not lock the doors if the key is in the
ignition.
Press the side of the switch with the lock symbol to lock
the doors. This is the right side for the driver’s switch
and the left side for the front passenger’s switch.
You can disable this function through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Press the side of the switch with the unlock symbol to
unlock the doors. This is the left side for the driver’s
switch and the right side for the front passenger’s switch.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Door Lock
Rear Door Security Locks
If your vehicle has power door locks, the doors will
automatically lock when the shift lever is moved out of
PARK (P) for a vehicle with an automatic transaxle.
For a vehicle with a manual transaxle, the speed must
be greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each rear
door. You must open the
rear doors to access them.
The automatic door locking feature cannot be disabled.
Programmable Automatic
Door Unlock
If your vehicle has power locks, it has a programmable
automatic door unlock feature.
The doors can be programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to automatically unlock several
for more information.
To set the locks, do the following:
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
2. Close the door.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
Trunk
To release the trunk lid from the outside, use the key or
the remote keyless entry transmitter, if equipped.
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, if equipped, the power door lock
switch, or by lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
{CAUTION:
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
Lockout Protection
If your vehicle has power door locks, it will have this
feature. If you press the power door lock switch
when the key is in the ignition and any door is open,
all the doors will lock and the driver’s door will unlock.
Be sure to remove the key from the ignition when
locking your vehicle.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
The lockout protection can be overridden by pressing
and holding the power door lock in the lock position for
three seconds.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To open the trunk from
inside the vehicle, press
the remote trunk release
button located inside
the driver’s storage
compartment located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
The remote trunk release works when the ignition is
either off or in ACC, or the vehicle speed is less
than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Notice: Do not use the emergency trunk release
handle as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release handle is only
intended to aid a person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk from the inside.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the inside of the trunk lid of your
vehicle. This handle will glow following exposure to light.
Pull the release handle and push the trunk lid open
from the inside to open the trunk.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or
even death from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a
vehicle, especially with the windows closed in
warm or hot weather.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Manual Windows
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature which allows the window to be lowered fully
without continuously pressing the switch. This switch is
labeled AUTO. Press the front of the switch to the
first position, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. Press the switch down fully and the window
will go all the way down.
If your vehicle has manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
Power Windows
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of
the switch up.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The driver’s window controls
also include a lockout switch. Press the right side of the
switch to prevent the rear passengers from using
their window switches. The driver can still control all the
windows with the lockout on. Press the switch to the
left to return to normal window operation. A red bar on
the right side of the switch indicates that the lockout
feature is off.
Sedan Shown, Coupe
Similar
If your vehicle has power windows, the switches on the
driver’s door armrest control each of the windows.
Sun Visors
In addition, each passenger’s door has a window switch
that controls that door’s window. Press the front of
the switch to open the window. Pull the front of
the switch up to close it.
To block out glare, swing down the visor(s). The visors
can also be detached from the center mount and
swung to the side to cover the windows.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Arming the System
Your vehicle may have a driver’s side vanity mirror.
Swing down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose
the mirror.
With the ignition off, you can arm the system by doing
any one of the following:
• Press the remote keyless entry transmitter lock
button.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
• Press the power door lock switch while the driver’s
door is open.
The system will arm after either of these things occur:
• Thirty seconds after all the doors are closed.
• Sixty seconds with any door open.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will
arm immediately. The system will still arm in 60 seconds
if a door is open. When the open door is closed, it will
also become armed.
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
The security light, located on the instrument panel
cluster, will turn on to indicate that arming has been
initiated. Once the system is armed, the security light will
flash once every three seconds.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
If you do not want to arm the system, you may lock the
car with the manual lock knobs on the doors.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disarming the System
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
You can disarm the system by doing any one of the
following:
To turn off the system alarm, do one of the following:
• Press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. The system will then re-arm itself.
• Press the remote keyless entry transmitter unlock
button.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. This will also disarm the system.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will
also disarm the system.
If the system is armed and the trunk is opened using
the trunk release button on the transmitter, the system
will temporarily disarm itself and re-arm when the
trunk has been closed. This allows you to exit the
vehicle, lock the doors using the transmitter, and open
the trunk using the transmitter without having to
disarm and re-arm the system.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If you hear three chirps when you press the unlock, lock,
or trunk release buttons on the remote keyless
transmitter, it means that the content theft security
system alarm was previously activated.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will stop
flashing.
PASS-Key® III+
How the System Alarm is Activated
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
If the system is armed, it can be activated by either:
• Opening the driver’s door or trunk. This will cause
a ten second pre-alarm chirp followed by a
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
• Opening any other door. This will immediately
cause a full alarm of horn and lights for
thirty seconds.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on, the key may have a damaged
transponder. Turn the ignition off and try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be not damaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may
be faulty. See your dealer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with PASS-Key® III+
(Personalized Automotive Security System)
theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This means you do not have
to do anything special to arm or disarm the system.
It works when you insert or remove the key from
the ignition.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new key do the following:
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a + stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to LOCK,
and remove the key.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast
or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts. Do not exceed
5,000 engine rpm. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) on page 4-46
for the trailer towing capabilities of your vehicle
and more information.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
RUN position within five seconds of the original key
being turned to the LOCK position.
5. The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes on
and stays on, you may be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+ system, however,
is not working properly and must be serviced by
your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key® III+ system at this time.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9(LOCK): This position locks your steering column.
It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able
to remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to four
different positions.
If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignition switch
cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever is
in PARK (P).
If you have a manual transaxle, the ignition switch can
be turned to LOCK in any shift lever position.
{CAUTION:
If you have a manual transaxle removing the key
from the ignition switch will lock the steering
column and result in a loss of ability to steer the
vehicle. This could cause a collision. If you need
to turn the engine off while the vehicle is
moving, turn the key to ACC.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only
with your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in.
If it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while
you turn the key hard. If none of this works,
then your vehicle needs service.
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates some of
your electrical accessories. It unlocks the steering wheel
and ignition.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the switch.
The switch stays in the RUN position when the engine
is running. But even when the ignition is not running,
you can use RUN to operate your electrical accessories
and to display some warning and indicator lights.
Column Lock Release
The following procedure allows the ignition to be turned
to LOCK and for ignition key removal in case of a
dead battery or low voltage battery.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in PARK (P).
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to RUN for normal driving.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door
while in LOCK or ACC, when the key has not been
removed from the ignition.
2. Using a tool, pry off the cover from the bottom of
the steering column.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle has a Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
feature which allow’s the radio, power windows,
and sunroof to continue to work up to 10 minutes after
the ignition is turned off.
Your vehicle’s radio will work when the ignition key is in
RUN or ACC. Once the key is turned from RUN to
LOCK, the radio will continue to work for 10 minutes or
until the driver’s door is opened. Also, the power
windows and sunroof will continue to work for up to
10 minutes or until any door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Automatic Transaxle
3. Place your finger into the access hole and locate
the plunger.
Move the shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
The engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
4. Press and hold the plunger toward the driver’s
door while turning the ignition key to LOCK.
Remove the key.
Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer as soon
as possible.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If the engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
Manual Transaxle
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor and
start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down — that is a safety feature.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition to
START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When the engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not
run your engine at high speed when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C),
let the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine coolant
heater.
{CAUTION:
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have
an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord. This
will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
For the 2.2L and 2.4L engines, the electrical
cord is located on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle between the strut and the air cleaner/filter.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you
contact a GM dealer in the area where you will be
parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best
advice for that particular area.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transaxle,
the shift lever is located on the console between
the seats.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
trailer, see Towing a Trailer (Automatic
There are several different
positions for the automatic
transaxle.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift
lock control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
ease pressure on the shift lever — push the shift lever all
the way into PARK (P) and also release the shift lever
button as you maintain brake application. Then move the
shift lever into the gear you wish. Press the shift lever
button before moving the shift lever. See Shifting Out of
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while the engine is running at high speed may
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Notice: Shifting to a drive gear from NEUTRAL (N)
while the vehicle is moving could damage the
transaxle. Make sure the vehicle is stopped before
shifting from NEUTRAL (N) into a drive gear.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
on page 4-30.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving with the automatic transaxle. If you need
more power for passing, and you are:
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator all the way down.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTERMEDIATE (I): This position is also used for
normal driving. However, it offers braking from
the engine for slight downgrades where the vehicle
would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade.
If repetitive shifts occur between third and fourth
gears on steep uphills, this position can be used to
prevent repetitive shifting. Fuel economy will be lower
than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some
times you might choose INTERMEDIATE (I) instead of
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
Manual Transaxle Operation
This is your shift pattern.
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
LOW (L): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than INTERMEDIATE (I).
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is put in LOW (L), the transaxle will
not shift into LOW (L) until the vehicle is going slowly
enough.
Here is how to operate your manual transaxle:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes, or parking brake to hold the vehicle
in place.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Do not shift down
more than one gear at a time when you
downshift.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
Up-Shift Light
If you have a manual
transaxle, you may have
an up-shift light. This
light will show you when to
shift to the next higher
gear for the best fuel
economy.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
United States Only
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road, and traffic conditions let
you. For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly
and shift when the light comes on.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the light when you downshift.
For vehicles with the 2.0L Supercharged engine, press
down the clutch pedal. Then, lift up the ring on the shift
lever below the shift knob and shift into REVERSE (R).
Let up on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing the
accelerator pedal.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Brake
Automatic Transaxle Parking Brake Lever
The parking brake lever is located between the
front seats.
Manual Transaxle Parking Brake Lever
For vehicles equipped with an armrest, lift the console
armrest in order to access the parking brake lever.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle)
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow. If you are pulling a trailer,
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime will
sound and a warning light will flash when the parking
brake is applied and the vehicle is moving faster
than 5 mph (8 km/h). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-40.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the parking
brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle,
then you will be able to pull the shift lever out of
PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button. If you can, it means that the shift lever
was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle)
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever button again.
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer or a professional towing service.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK (P)
unless the ignition is in a position other than LOCK.
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transaxle)
The shift lock release is always functional except in
the case of a an uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
Before leaving your vehicle, fully press the clutch pedal
in, move the shift lever into REVERSE (R), and firmly
apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has
been placed in REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal
pressed in, you can turn the ignition key to LOCK,
remove the key and release the clutch. See Manual
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
information.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following sequence:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Then press the shift lever button.
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
on page 2-28.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
trailer, also see Towing a Trailer (Automatic Transaxle)
on page 4-46.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the Mirror
Mirrors
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
Manual Rearview Mirror
To reduce glare from lamps behind you, move the lever
toward you to the night position.
Outside Manual Mirror
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®
Adjust your outside mirror so you can just see the side
of your vehicle and have a clear view of objects behind
you. The mirror can be folded in to enter narrow areas.
If the vehicle has this feature, an automatic dimming
mirror automatically dims to the proper level to minimize
glare at night from lights behind your vehicle. For
on page 2-35.
Outside Remote Control Mirror
Adjust the driver’s outside mirror with the control lever
located on the driver’s door. Adjust the outside mirrors
so that the side of the vehicle can be seen while
sitting in a comfortable driving position.
P (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
To adjust the passenger’s outside mirror, sit in the
driver’s seat and have a passenger adjust the mirror for
you. The mirror is a manual fold design.
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned on each
time the ignition is started. A light near the on/off button
will come on to indicate the automatic dimming is on.
Press the on/off button for about four seconds to
manually turn the automatic dimming function on or off.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
The controls for the
outside power mirrors, are
located on the driver’s
door armrest.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also makes things appear farther
away than they really are.
Move the selector switch located below the four-way
control pad to the left or right to choose either the
driver’s side or passenger’s side mirror. To adjust a
mirror, use the arrows located on the four-way control
pad to move the mirror in the desired direction.
Adjust each outside mirror so that a little of the vehicle
and the area behind it can be seen while sitting in a
comfortable driving position. Keep the selector switch
in the center position when not adjusting either
outside mirror.
Both mirrors can manually be folded by pulling them
toward the vehicle. This feature may be useful when
going through a car wash or a confined space. Push the
mirrors away from the vehicle, to the normal position,
before driving.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms and
Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
OnStar® System
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar® Emergency where we
can request emergency services be sent to your
location. If you lock your keys in the car, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. if you need roadside assistance,
press the OnStar® button and they will get you the help
you need.
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for one year from the date of
purchase. You can extend this plan beyond the
first year, or upgrade to the Directions and Connections®
Plan to meet your needs. For more information, press
the OnStar® button to speak to an advisor.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Personal Calling
Safe and Sound Plan
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using a
wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide in
the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor by
pressing the OnStar® button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
• Advanced Automatic Collision Notification
(If Equipped)
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
• Online Concierge
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature of
OnStar® Personal Calling that uses your minutes to
access weather, local traffic reports, and stock quotes.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide for
more information.
Directions and Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver’s Storage Compartment
Storage Areas
The driver’s storage compartment is located near the
left side of the steering column on the bottom of the
instrument panel. It can be used to store small items and
contains the remote trunk release switch. For more
page 2-10.
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on the lever. Close the
glove box with a firm push.
Cupholder(s)
Convenience Net
There are two cupholders located at the front of the
center console, in front of the shift lever. There are also
cupholders for the rear seat passengers located at
the rear of the center console.
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You will see
it inside the back wall of the trunk. Put small loads
behind the net. It can help keep them from falling over
during sharp turns or quick starts and stops.
Center Console Storage Area
Unclip a corner of the convenience net to fit larger
objects behind the net, then reclip it to secure them in
place. The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store
them in the trunk as far forward as you can.
Your vehicle may have a center console armrest with
storage area. Use the lever on the front of the console
to open it.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you
are not using it.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press and hold the switch rearward to open the glass
panel to the vent position. Press and hold the switch
rearward a second time to open the sunroof. If the
sunshade is closed, it will open automatically with the
sunroof.
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a power
sunroof. The switch
that operates it is located
on the headliner.
To close the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold
it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released. The sunshade must be closed
manually.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed
if the vehicle has an electrical failure.
Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of the
sliding glass panel, damage will occur and the
sunroof may not open or close properly. Always
close the glass panel before closing the sunshade.
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be on,
or turned to ACC, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
must be active. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 2-20.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-38
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
on page 3-17.
O. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). Accessory Power
Outlet (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
on page 3-16.
E. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). See
page 3-17.
page 3-10.
R. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator and Heated
Seats Button (If Equipped). See Passenger Airbag
on page 1-4.
on page 3-15.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located in
the center of the
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
instrument panel.
Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to
the highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To tilt the wheel, pull down the lever. Then move the
wheel to a comfortable position, pull up the lever to lock
the wheel in place.
• 23 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
on page 3-13.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned
out, replace it to help avoid an accident.
If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn,
page 5-93.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x (Delay): When the lever is in the intermittent
position, turn the intermittent adjust band with this
symbol on it up or down to set for a shorter or longer
delay between wipes. To the left of the adjust band are
bars, increasing in size from bottom to top, that
indicate the frequency of the wipes. Smaller bars mean
the wipers movement is less frequent. Larger bars
mean the movement is more frequent.
Windshield Wipers
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the first
setting past intermittent, for steady wiping at low speed.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the second
setting past intermittent, for wiping at high speed.
Use this lever, located on the right side of the steering
wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to this
position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the
windshield wipers start; then let go. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wiping cycle. If you want
additional wiping cycles, hold the lever down longer.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
& (Intermittent): Move the lever to this position to
choose a delayed wiping cycle. Rotate the intermittent
adjustment band to set for shorter or longer delay
cycles. To the left of the adjustment band are bars,
increasing in size from top to bottom. Smaller bars mean
the wiper movement is less frequent and larger bars
mean the wiper movement is more frequent.
Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing
well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to
clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
During intermittent wiping mode, the cycle delay time is
also affected by vehicle speed. As your vehicle speed
increases, your delay cycle time will automatically
decrease.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools. Clear
away snow or ice to prevent an overload. If the motor
gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away the snow
or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h).
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for
more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps will turn
on automatically. They will turn off 15 seconds after
the wipers are turned off.
{CAUTION:
Windshield Washer
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
To wash your windshield, press the button at the end of
the lever until the washers begin.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When you release the button, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for about three times
or will resume the speed you were using before.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise
control system on and off.
+RES (Resume): Press this part of the button to
resume a set speed and to accelerate the speed.
{CAUTION:
−SET (Set): Press this part of the button to set a speed
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
and to decrease the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.
The indicator light on the button will come on.
2. Get to the speed you want.
3. Press the −SET part of the control button and
release it. The CRUISE ENGAGED message
will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
to show the system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See
road conditions allow, the cruise control can be
used again.
The cruise control buttons are located on the
steering wheel.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. To return to your
previously set speed, you do not need to go through
the set process again. Once you’re going about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more, you can press the +RES
part of the button briefly.
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
• Push and hold the −SET part of the button until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
−SET part of the button briefly. Each time you
do this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
This will take you back up to your previously chosen
speed and stay there.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the brake
pedal but do not turn it off. Accelerate to a higher
speed and reset the cruise control.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the +RES part of the button. Hold it there until
you get up to the speed you want, and then release
the button. To increase your speed in very small
amounts, press the +RES part of the button briefly
and then release it. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exterior lamp switch has the following four positions:
Ending Cruise Control
To end cruise control, step lightly on the brake pedal or
the clutch if your vehicle has a manual transmission.
2 (Headlamps): This position turns on the
headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.
Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch will only end the
current cruise control session. Press the cruise
control on/off button to turn the system completely off.
; (Parking Lamps): This position turns on the
parking lamps and taillamps only.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): This position
automatically turns on the Daytime Running Lamps
during daytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps at night. This position must be selected in
order for the Wiper Activated Headlamps to be activated.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
Headlamps
P (Off/On): This position is the momentary Off/On
switch for the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada,
this only works when a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle is in PARK (P).
When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of the
switch to off/on will turn off the Automatic Headlamp
System. Rotating the switch to off/on again will turn the
Automatic Headlamp System back on. The Automatic
Headlamp System is always turned on at the beginning
of an ignition cycle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers are turned on. For this
feature to work, automatic lighting must be enabled. See
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor on
top of the instrument panel. Make sure it is not covered,
or the head lamps will be on when not needed.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also turn
off 15 seconds after the windshield wiper control is
turned off.
The DRL system will make your front turn signal lamps
come on when the following conditions are met:
Headlamps on Reminder
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
• The ignition is on.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO or the
parking lamps only position.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The parking brake is released.
When the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, parking lamps, and instrument panel lights
will not be illuminated unless you have turned the
exterior lamps control to the parking lamp position.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The fog lamp button is
located on the instrument
panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
The control for this feature
is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
The ignition must be on to turn your fog lamps on.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. An indicator
light on the cluster will come on when the fog lamps
are on. Push the button again to turn the fog lamps off.
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim them.
The parking lamps will automatically turn on and off
when the fog lamps are turned on and off.
Dome Lamp
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on.
Your vehicle may have a dome lamp.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn the
lamp off, even when a door is opened.
1 (Door): Move the lever to this position to turn the
lamp on whenever a door is opened.
+ (On): Move the lever to this position to turn the
dome lamp on.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entry/Exit Lighting
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The lamps inside your vehicle will go on when you open
any door. These lamps will fade out after about
20 seconds after all of the doors have been closed or
when the ignition is turned on. These lamps will also go
on when you press the trunk release, unlock symbol
button or the horn symbol on the keyless entry system
transmitter.
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or CB
radio. The outlet can accept electrical equipment rated
at a maximum of 20 amps.
The accessory power outlet is located in the center
console, rearward of the shift lever.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about
20 seconds after your key is removed from the ignition
to provide an illuminated exit.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Mirror Reading Lamps
Your vehicle may have reading lamps on the rearview
mirror. Push the button to turn the reading lamps on
and off.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery saver feature
designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system will
automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes. This will
avoid draining the battery.
with your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Climate Controls
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
Vehicles with Air Conditioning shown,
without Air Conditioning similar
To clean the center console ashtray, remove the entire
ashtray and empty it.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage your vehicle. Never put flammable items in
the ashtray.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operation
9 (Off): To turn the fan off, turn the knob all the way
counterclockwise to the off position.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Temperature Control: Turn the right knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs the remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is
directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the
floor outlets.
h (Recirculate): Press this button to prevent outside
air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help heat or
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. An indicator
light above the button will come on in this mode. The air
conditioning compressor also comes on. This mode is not
available for floor, defog and defrost modes. When the
recirculation button is pressed, the recirculate indicator
light will flash five times and outside air will be delivered.
Operation in this mode during periods of high humidity
and cool outside temperatures may result in increased
window fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select
the defrost mode.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield and
side windows.
The left knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
Outside Air: This mode allows outside air to circulate
through your vehicle. This mode is automatically
active if recirculate is not selected. There is no button
for outside air.
Recirculation is not available in this mode.
9(Fan): Turn the center knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. The fan must be turned on to run
the air conditioning compressor.
#(Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has air
conditioning, press this button to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. When this button is pressed, an
indicator light above the button will come on to let you
know the air conditioning is activated.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
your windshield and side windows. Use the defog mode
to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly. For best results, clear
all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.
For quick cool down on hot days:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
3. Select air conditioning.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Turn the left knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn off the recirculation
by pressing the button again.
-(Defog): This mode directs approximately half of the
air to the windshield and the side window outlets and
half to the floor outlets. When you select this mode the
system runs the air conditioning compressor. To
defog the windows faster, turn the temperature control
knob clockwise to the warmest setting.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Recirculation mode is not available in defog mode.
0(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side window
outlets and the floor outlets. When you select this mode
the system runs the air conditioning compressor. To
defrost the windows faster, turn the temperature control
knob clockwise to the warmest setting.
The air conditioning compressor cannot be turned on
when the fan is off.
Recirculation mode is not available in defrost mode.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Use the thumbwheels located next to and below the air
outlets to change the direction of the airflow and to
open and close the outlets.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
Operation Tips
< (Rear): Press the button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from
the rear window as possible. An indicator light above
the button will come on to let you know that the
rear window defogger is activated.
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately
seven minutes before turning off. If the vehicle is moving
faster than 50 mph (80 kph), the rear defogger will
stay on. The defogger can also be turned off by pressing
the button again or by turning off the engine.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Passenger compartment air, both outside air and
recirculated air, is routed through a passenger
compartment filter. The filter removes certain particles
from the air, including pollen and dust particles.
Reductions in airflow, which may occur more quickly in
dusty areas, indicate that the filter needs to be
replaced early.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for replacement intervals. See your
retailer for details on changing the filter. To find out
what type of filter to use, see Normal Maintenance
To access the passenger compartment air filter you
must go through the glove box.
1. Open the glove box and remove all articles from
the inside.
3. Open the passenger compartment air filter door by
reaching through the opening in the back of the
glove box and raising the tab until the door can be
opened downward.
2. Tilt the glove box door down by squeezing on each
side of the glove box until the door can be lowered
from its track. Lower the glove box door.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
4. Remove the filter by sliding it out of the housing.
When installing a new air filter make sure the AIR FLOW
arrow is pointing downward. Reverse Steps 1 through 5
making sure the glove box door snaps back into place.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They’re a big help.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you will need to drive safely
and economically.
United States SS Cluster shown, Canada and Base similar
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
sound for several seconds to remind you and your
passengers to buckle your safety belts. The driver safety
belt light will also come on and stay on for several
seconds, then it will flash for several more. You should
buckle your seat belt.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the
driver information center. You can set a Trip A and
Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply open the driver’s door and the
mileage will be displayed briefly.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
Tachometer
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensor, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
If equipped, several seconds after the key is turned to
RUN or START, a chime will sound for several seconds
to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag is
for more information. The passenger safety belt light
will also come on and stay on for several seconds, then
it will flash for several more.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then the
light should go out. This
means the system is ready.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system, then
your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
United States
Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START, the
passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This
is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if
the airbag deploys.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
Charging System Light
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
and the engine is not
running, as a check
{CAUTION:
to show you it is working.
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness
light ever come on together, it means that
something may be wrong with the airbag
system. If this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front passenger seat
may not have the protection of the frontal
page 3-25.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked by your GM dealer. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Up-Shift Light
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle may have an up-shift light. When this light
comes on, you should shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions allow you to.
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
This light is located in your
instrument panel cluster to
the left of the tachometer.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
United States Only
information.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
If your vehicle is equipped
with the anti-lock brake
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds.
That is normal.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking brake is
fully released. You may notice that the pedal is harder
to push or, the pedal may go closer to the floor. It
may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-36.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while you are driving, your vehicle
needs service. If the regular brake system warning light
is not on, you still have brakes, but you do not have
anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system warning light on
can lead to an accident. If the light is still on
after you have pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. This
is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come
on for the following reasons:
Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light
• If you turn the system off by moving the shift lever
to FIRST (1), the warning light will come on and
stay on. To turn the system back on, move the shift
lever back to a position other than FIRST (1).
The warning light should go off. See Enhanced
information.
If your vehicle is equipped
with the Enhanced
Traction System (ETS),
this warning light should
come on briefly as
you start the engine.
• The warning light will come on when you set your
parking brake with the engine running, and it will
stay on if your parking brake does not release fully.
If the transaxle shift lever is in any position other
than FIRST (1) and the warning light stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means
there is a problem with the system.
If the warning light does not come on, then have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on when you are
driving, there may be a problem with your Enhanced
Traction System and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of time when the
transaxle shift lever is in any position other than
FIRST (1), your vehicle needs service.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
The engine coolant
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
page 5-29 for more information.
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by your warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on.
This light will also come on when starting your vehicle.
If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see
“If the Light Is On Steady” following.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working, but the light will go out when you
turn the ignition to START. If it does not come on
with the ignition on, you may have a problem
with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may blink
on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
Oil Pressure Light
{CAUTION:
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on when you
are driving. This indicates
that your engine is not
receiving enough oil.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for changing engine oil.
The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Highbeam On Light
For information regarding
this light, see
on page 2-14.
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
Fog Lamp Light
Fuel Gage
If equipped, the fog lamps
light will come on when the
fog lamps are in use.
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
Boost Gage
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
United States
Canada
If equipped, this gage is located near the driver’s side of
the instrument panel cluster.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
This gage indicates vacuum during light to moderate
throttle and boost under heavier throttle.
This gage displays the air pressure level in the
intake manifold before it enters the engine’s
combustion chamber.
This gage is automatically centered at zero every time
the ignition is turned to RUN. Actual vacuum or boost is
displayed from this zero point. Changes in ambient
pressure, such as driving in mountains and changing
weather, will slightly change the zero reading.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Operation and Displays
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in
the following.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display gives you
the status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is
also used to display driver personalization menu modes
and warning/status messages. All messages will appear
in the DIC display, located at the bottom of the
Information Modes
tachometer on the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC buttons are
located to the right of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
4 (Information): Press this button to scroll through the
following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer are displayed. This mode
shows the temperature outside of the vehicle in either
degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C) and the
total distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km). The outside air
temperature will appear on the left side of the DIC
display and the odometer will appear on the right side of
the display.
4 (Information): Press this button to scroll through the
vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization menu
mode setting, or acknowledge a warning message.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
page 3-42.
Press and hold the information and reset buttons at the
same time for several seconds, then release to enter
the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRIP A or TRIP B
ECON (Economy)
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B is
displayed. These modes show the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers can
be used at the same time.
Press the information button until ECON is displayed.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (mpg)
or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle is
getting based on current and past driving conditions.
Press and hold the reset button while ECON is displayed
to reset the average fuel economy. Average fuel
economy will then be calculated starting from that point.
If the average fuel economy is not reset, it will be
continually updated each time you drive.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing and holding the reset button for a few seconds
while the desired trip odometer is displayed.
FUEL RANGE
AV (Average) SPEED
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE is
displayed. This mode shows the remaining distance you
can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank.
Press the information button until AV SPEED is
displayed. This mode shows the vehicle’s average
speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h).
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
Press and hold the reset button while AV SPEED is
displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL LIFE
DIC Warnings and Messages
Press the information button until OIL LIFE is displayed.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
These messages will appear if there is a problem
detected in one of your vehicle’s systems.
Any message will clear when the vehicle’s condition is
no longer present. The warning message will come back
on the next time the vehicle is turned off and back on
if the condition is still present. With most messages,
a warning chime will sound when the message is
displayed. You can also acknowledge and clear some
warning messages from the DIC display by pressing
either the reset or information buttons. Your vehicle may
have other warning messages.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
page 6-4.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
and “OIL–LIFE RESET” under DIC Vehicle
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF
This message is displayed if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON
COOLANT
This message is displayed if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
Press the information button until COOLANT is
displayed. This mode shows the temperature of the
engine coolant in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
or degrees Celsius (°C).
BRAKE FLUID
This message will display if the ignition is on to inform
the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the
brake system serviced by your GM dealer as soon
as possible.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGE OIL SOON
ENGINE DISABLED
This message is displayed when the life of the engine
oil has expired and it should be changed.
This message is displayed if the starting of the engine is
disabled. Have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer
immediately.
When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the engine oil life system separately. See
“OIL-LIFE RESET” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
information.
ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED
This message informs you that the vehicle has reduced
engine power to avoid damaging the engine.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message appears when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message is displayed if the gas cap has not been
fully tightened. You should recheck your gas cap to
ensure that it is on properly. A few driving trips with the
cap properly installed should turn the display off.
KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW
This message is displayed if the remote keyless entry
transmitter battery is low. See “Battery Replacement”
page 2-4.
CRUISE ENGAGED
This message is displayed when the cruise control
more information.
LOW COOLANT
If your vehicle has a 2.0L engine, this message is
displayed when there is a low level of engine coolant.
Have the cooling system serviced by your GM dealer as
for more information.
DOOR AJAR
This message is displayed if one or more of the
vehicle’s doors are not closed properly. When this
message appears, you should make sure that the door
is closed completely.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOW FUEL
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message is displayed when your vehicle is low on
fuel. You should refill the fuel tank as soon as
This message is displayed when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Let only a qualified technician
work on your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer immediately.
LOW TRACTION
TRUNK AJAR
This message is displayed when the Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery
road conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. See Enhanced
information.
This message is displayed when the trunk lid of your
vehicle is not closed completely. You should make sure
page 2-10.
DIC Vehicle Personalization
PARKING BRAKE
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the features available will be
displayed on your DIC.
This message is displayed if the parking brake is left
POWER STEERING
This message is displayed if a problem has been
detected with the electric power steering. Have your
vehicle serviced by your GM dealer immediately.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since then.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
Personalization Menu Modes
UNITS
Entering Personalization Menu
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
This feature allows you to select the units of
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
the reset button to scroll through the available settings:
2. Press and hold the information and reset buttons at
the same time for several seconds, then release to
enter the personalization menu.
If the vehicle speed is greater than 2 mph (3 km/h),
only the UNITS menu will be accessible.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units. For example, distance
will be shown in miles (mi) and fuel economy in miles
per gallon (mpg).
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units. For example, distance will be
shown in kilometers (km) and fuel economy in liters
per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the next
feature.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL-LIFE RESET
UNLOCK HORN
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on the first press
of the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, can be enabled or disabled. When UNLOCK
HORN appears on the display, press the reset button
to scroll through the available settings:
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine
oil life system. To reset the system, see Engine Oil
information.
LOCK HORN
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp every time
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LOCK
HORN appears on the display, press the reset button to
scroll through the available settings:
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the remote keyless entry transmitter lock button.
The horn will still chirp on the second press.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIGHT FLASH
DELAY LOCK
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s exterior hazard/turn signal
lighting to flash every time the lock or unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, can
be enabled or disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears
on the display, press the reset button to scroll
through the available settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press the reset button to
scroll through the available settings:
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power lock
switch or the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter a second time.
OFF: The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting will not
flash when the lock or unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
ON (default): The exterior hazard/turn signal lighting
will flash when the lock or unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO UNLK (Unlock)
UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transaxle Only)
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press the reset
button to scroll through the available settings:
This screen displays only if your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle and DRIVER or ALL is selected for
the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press the reset button to
scroll through the available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the ignition is
turned off.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock. You
will need to manually unlock the doors.
SHIFT TO P (Park) (default): The door(s) will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
If you have a manual transaxle vehicle, the door(s) will
automatically unlock when the ignition is turned off.
for more information.
If you have an automatic transaxle vehicle, you
can select when the automatic unlocking will occur. See
“UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transaxle Only)” following.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS
LANGUAGE
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter lighting to
turn on each time the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When EXT LIGHTS appears on the display,
press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. Press the reset button to scroll
through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display all information
in English.
FRENCH: The DIC will display all information
in French.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter is pressed.
SPANISH: The DIC will display all information
in Spanish.
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn on
when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed.
GERMAN: The DIC will display all information
in German.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and exit out of the
personalization menu mode.
page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
following conditions occur:
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
page 4-2. Get familiar with your vehicle’s audio
system so you can use it with less effort and take full
advantage of its features.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself with
its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls (if equipped).
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with
the operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the operation
of sound equipment that has been added.
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: The chime signals related to seat belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the GM radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional equipment
is added to your vehicle, the chimes may not work.
Make sure that replacement or additional equipment
is compatible with your vehicle before installing it.
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
To set the hour, press the clock button. The clock
symbol will appear on the display and the hour number
will flash. Then turn the ADJ knob to increase or to
decrease. To set the minutes, press the clock button
again. The minute numbers will flash. Then turn the ADJ
knob to increase or to decrease. The time can be set
with the ignition on or off.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the clock button to enter the clock set mode, then
press and hold the clock button for three seconds
until UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is
not available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear
on the display.
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
To set the hour, press the clock button until the hour
number flashes. Then turn the ADJ knob to increase or
to decrease. To set the minutes, press the clock
button again until the minute numbers flash. Then turn
the ADJ knob to increase or to decrease. The time
can be set with the ignition on or off.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the time radio station frequency. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
Radio with CD (Base Level)
To change the default on the display, press the
DISP knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce a
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
and AM. The display will show the selection.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds until you hear two beeps.
The radio will go to the first preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press either arrow again to stop
scanning presets.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BASS or TREB. Then press and hold the EQ button for
more than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
the level will be adjusted to the middle position.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
To adjust the tone controls to the middle position, first
end out of tone by pressing another button, causing the
radio to perform that function, or by waiting five seconds
for the display to return to the default display. Then press
and hold the EQ button for more than two seconds until
you hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
x w (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
the balance/fade button until BAL appears on the
display. Then turn the ADJ knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
EQ (Tone): To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the EQ button until BASS or TREB appears
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or
to decrease. The display will show the bass or treble
level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the balance/fade button
until FADE appears on the display. Then turn the
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold the
balance/fade button for more than two seconds. You will
hear a beep and the level will be adjusted to the
middle position.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject button or the DISP knob.
To adjust the speaker controls to the middle position,
first end out of balance and fade by pressing another
button, causing the radio to perform that function, or by
waiting five seconds for the display to return to the
default display. Then press and hold the balance/fade
button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
CEN will appear on the display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs without an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Radio Messages
CAL (Calibration): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that the radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to your GM dealer for service.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD
this section.
LOCK: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
5 y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. T# and
RDM will appear on the display. Press RDM again
to turn off random play, OFF will appear on the display.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
6 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to
hear a track over again. RPT will appear on the display.
The current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT
again to turn off repeat play, OFF will appear on
the display.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds. Press the right arrow to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the display.
If either arrow is pressed more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 r (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
If either arrow is held for more then two seconds, the
CD will enter CD scan mode and the CD will play
the first 10 seconds of each track. Press this button
again to stop scanning.
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. You will hear
sound at a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see the current
track number or the elapsed time of the track.
CD Messages
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
To change the default on the display, press this knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. You will hear a beep and the
selected display will now be the default.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
B (CD): Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio with CD (Uplevel)
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name
of the program being broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if
available). XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels
including music, news, sports, talk, and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio and
text information that includes song title and artist name.
A service fee is required in order to receive the XM™
service. For more information, contact XM™ at
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For RDS, press the DISP knob to change what appears
on the display. The display options are station name,
RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name of the
program (if available).
Playing the Radio
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob, while in
XM™ mode, to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
AUTO u (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce a beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW,
AUTO VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. AUTO VOL NONE will appear on
the display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle
speed or if the engine is not running. To turn automatic
volume off, press this button until AUTO VOL OFF
appears on the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow for
more than four seconds until you hear two beeps.
The radio will go to the first preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press either arrow again to stop
scanning presets.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
EQ (Tone): To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the EQ button until BASS or TREBLE appears
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or to
decrease. The display will show the bass or treble level.
If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BASS or TREBLE. Then press and hold the EQ button
for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep
and the level will be adjusted to the middle position.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
To adjust the tone controls to the middle position,
first end out of tone by pressing another button, causing
the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to the default
display. Then press and hold the EQ button for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL
CENTERED will appear on the display.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
x w (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
the balance/fade button until BAL appears on the
display. Then turn the ADJ knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. PTY and a program type will
appear on the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the balance/fade button
until FADE appears on the display. Then turn the
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK left arrow to select the PTY and to take
you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY press the
SEEK left arrow again. If the radio cannot find the
desired PTY, NONE FOUND will appear on the
display and the radio will return to the last station
you were listening to.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold the
balance/fade button for more than two seconds. You will
hear a beep and the level will be adjusted to the
middle position.
After 15 seconds of inactivity or if the P-TYPE
button is pressed again, the radio will exit program
type select mode.
To adjust the speaker controls to the middle position,
first end out of balance and fade by pressing another
button, causing the radio to perform that function, or by
waiting five seconds for the display to return to the
default display. Then press and hold the balance/fade
button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
ALL CENTERED will appear on the display.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDS Messages
Radio Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your GM dealer for service.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to
see the message. The message may display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the MSG button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of the button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, MSG will disappear from the display
until another new message is received. The last message
can be displayed by pressing the MSG button. You can
view the last message until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
MESSAGE will appear on the display.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit
Language Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel Unavail
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
No Title Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Information
CAT Not Found
XM Theft Locked
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your GM dealer.
XM Radio ID
Unknown
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Check XM Receivr
Check XM
Hardware failure in the
receiver module
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
XM not available
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject button or the DISP knob.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on the CD will start playing, where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs without an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
1 r (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD is
section.
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound
at a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. TRACK, the track
number, and the elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display. To change the default on the display,
time or elapsed time, press this knob until you see the
display you want, then hold the knob for two seconds.
The radio will produce one beep and the selected
display will now be the default.
5 y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM ON will appear on the display.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in random, to take you to the
previous or next track in sequential order.
Press RDM again to turn off random play, RANDOM
OFF will appear on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization will be automatically recalled
whenever a CD is played. For more information,
see AUTO EQ listed previously in this section.
6 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. REPEAT ON and the repeat symbol
will appear on the display. The current track will continue
to repeat.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in repeat, to take you to the
previous or next track.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play, REPEAT OFF
will appear on the display.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CD or to
access a remote device (if installed) when listening
to the radio.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds. Press the right arrow to go to the next
track. The track number will appear on the display. If
either arrow is pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
If either arrow is held for more then two seconds, the
CD will enter CD scan mode and the CD will play the
first 10 seconds of each track. Press this button again
to stop scanning.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Radio with CD (MP3)
CHECK DISC: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
Radio Data System (RDS)
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and in Canada (if
available). XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast channels
including music, news, sports, talk, and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality audio and
text information that includes song title and artist name.
A service fee is required in order to receive the XM™
service. For more information, contact XM™ at
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name
of the program being broadcast.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
AUTO u (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW,
AUTO VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. AUTO VOL NONE will appear on
the display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle
speed or if the engine is not running. To turn automatic
volume off, press this button until AUTO VOL OFF
appears on the display.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds until you hear two beeps.
The radio will go to the first preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press either arrow again to stop
scanning presets.
For RDS, press the DISP knob to change what appears
on the display. The display options are station name,
RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name of the
program (if available).
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce a beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
EQ (Tone): To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the EQ button until BASS or TREBLE appears
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or to
decrease. The display will show the bass or treble level.
If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BASS or TREBLE. Then press and hold the EQ button
for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep
and the level will be adjusted to the middle position.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
To adjust the tone controls to the middle position,
first end out of tone by pressing another button, causing
the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to the default
display. Then press and hold the EQ button for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL
CENTERED will appear on the display.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
x w (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
the balance/fade button until BAL appears on the
display. Then turn the ADJ knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. PTY and a program type will
appear on the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the balance/fade button
until FADE appears on the display. Then turn the
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK left arrow to select the PTY and to take
you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY press the
SEEK left arrow again. If the radio cannot find the
desired PTY, NONE FOUND will appear on the
display and the radio will return to the last station
you were listening to.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle
position, select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold
the balance/fade button for more than two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the level will be adjusted to
the middle position.
After 15 seconds of inactivity or if the P-TYPE
button is pressed again, the radio will exit program
type select mode.
To adjust the speaker controls to the middle position,
first end out of balance and fade by pressing another
button, causing the radio to perform that function, or by
waiting five seconds for the display to return to the
default display. Then press and hold the balance/fade
button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
ALL CENTERED will appear on the display.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDS Messages
Radio Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to your GM dealer for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your GM dealer for service.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to
see the message. The message may display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the MSG button.
A new group of words will appear on the display after
every press of the button. Once the complete message
has been displayed, MSG will disappear from the display
until another new message is received. The last message
can be displayed by pressing the MSG button. You can
view the last message until a new message is received or
a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
MESSAGE will appear on the display.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit
Language Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel Unavail
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to
another channel.
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Artist Info
No Title Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No CAT Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Information
CAT Not Found
XM Theft Locked
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with
your GM dealer.
XM Radio ID
Unknown
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Check XM Receivr
Check XM
Hardware failure in the
receiver module
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
XM not available
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject button or the DISP knob.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on the CD will start playing, where
it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs without an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
1 r (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. The sound will be muted.
Release this pushbutton to play the passage. The
elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD will not play properly. If the surface of the CD is
section.
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. The sound will be
muted. Release this pushbutton to play the passage.
The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to go to the previous or
next track(s). Stop turning this knob to play the track.
5 y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM ON will appear on the display.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. TRACK, the track
number, and the elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display. To change the default on the display,
time or elapsed time, press this knob until you see the
display you want, then hold the knob for two seconds.
The radio will produce one beep and the selected
display will now be the default.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in random, to take you to the
previous or next track in sequential order.
Press RDM again to turn off random play, RANDOM
OFF will appear on the display.
6 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. REPEAT ON and the repeat symbol
will appear on the display. The current track will continue
to repeat.
MSG (Message): Press this button to display the text
on commercially recorded CDs (if available).
Turn the ADJ knob, while in repeat, to take you to the
previous or next track.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization will be automatically recalled
whenever a CD is played. For more information,
see AUTO EQ listed previously in this section.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play, REPEAT OFF
will appear on the display.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds. Press the right arrow to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the display.
If either arrow is pressed more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CD or to
access a remote device (if installed) when listening
to the radio.
If either arrow is held for more then two seconds, the
CD will enter CD scan mode and the CD will play
the first 10 seconds of each track. Press this button
again to stop scanning.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system can support up to 11 folders in depth,
though, keep the depth of the folders to a minimum in
order to keep down the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during playback. If a
CD contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let
you access and navigate up to the maximum, but all
items over the maximum will be ignored.
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a
CD-R disc.
• Make sure to finalize the disc when burning an MP3
disc, using multiple sessions. It is usually better to
burn the disc all at once.
Root Directory
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed or
variable bit rates. Song title, artist name, and album
will be available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
Empty Directory or Folder
• Make sure playlists have a.pls, or.m3u, or.rmp
extension, other file extensions may not work.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file names, folder names, or playlist names may
use more disc memory space than necessary. To
conserve space on the disc, minimize the length of the
file, folder or playlist names. You can also play an
MP3 CD that was recorded using no file folders.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See DISP later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on a
CD that was recorded without folders or playlists.
When displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
File System and Naming
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name
is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will
display the file name without the extension (such as
.mp3) as the track name.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename will not be displayed.
Order of Play
Tracks will be played in the following order:
Preprogrammed Playlists
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first folder.
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play will begin from the first track in the first folder
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last
folder has been played, play will continue from the
first track of the first playlist.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Playing an MP3
With the ignition on, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in, and READING
DISC will appear on the display. The CD should begin
playing and the CD symbol will appear on the display.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject button or the DISP knob.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt
to play scratched or damaged CDs, you could
damage the CD player. When using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any
label, load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs without an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
1 r (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
eight times the normal playing speed. Release
this pushbutton to play the track. REV and the
elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. There may be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and
ejecting. If these problems occur, check the bottom
surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Care
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Press and hold
this pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
eight times the normal playing speed. Release this
pushbutton to play the track. FWD and the elapsed time
of the track will appear on the display.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to
the first track in the previous folder. Pressing this
pushbutton while in folder random mode will take you to
the previous folder and random the tracks in that folder.
6 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. TRACK REPEAT ON or FLDR
REPEAT ON and the repeat symbol will appear on the
display. The current track will continue to repeat.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in repeat, to take you to the
previous or next track.
4 # (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to the
first track in the next folder. Pressing this pushbutton
while in folder random mode will take you to the
next folder and random the tracks in that folder.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play, REPEAT OFF
will appear on the display.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track.
5 y (Random): To random the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
Press Random again while FLDR RANDOM ON
or PLST RANDOM ON is being displayed and, DISR
RANDOM ON will then appear on the display. Once
DISR RANDOM ON is displayed, the radio will
play tracks randomly across entire disc. After all of the
tracks in the current folder or playlist have been
played, the system will move on to the next folder or
playlist and play all of the tracks in random order.
To scan tracks, press either arrow for more than
two seconds to enter CD scan mode. The CD will play
the first 10 seconds of each track. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to go to the previous or
next track(s). Stop turning this knob to play the track.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track and name, folder and name, and the elapsed time
of the track. The display will show only eight characters,
but there can be up to four pages of text. If there are
more than eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist
name, pressing this knob within two seconds will take
you to the next page of text. If there are no other pages
to be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds
will take you to the next display mode.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in random, to take you to
the previous or next track in sequential order.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play, RANDOM OFF will appear on the display.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
this knob for two seconds.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
MSG (Message): MSG will appear on the display
whenever a current track has ID3 tag information. Press
this button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. MSG will disappear from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CD or to
access a remote device (if installed) when listening
to the radio.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
“MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCK or LOCKED will appear on
the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
x SEEK w: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow
to go to the next or previous track.
3-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations will boost
the power levels during the day, and then reduce
these levels during the night. Static can also occur when
things like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset stations
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
x u w (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
0 (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, or any other radio button, to turn
the sound on.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
Mute is unavailable when OnStar™ (if equipped)
is active.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
listening to the radio and a CD. The inactive CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as with
FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In
addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of
XM signal for a period of time. The radio may display
NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
Radio Reception
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CDs
Fixed Mast Antenna
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio
Antenna System
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Care of the CD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the internal
lens of the CD optics with lubricants.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21, it is
against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than
many might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the same
BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine
or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of
liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
consumes food just before or during drinking will have
a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water than
men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means
that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC level
than a man of her same body weight will when each has
the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if the
same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces or
90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have
a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC
level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
{CAUTION:
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle
go where you want it to go. They are the brakes,
the steering, and the accelerator. All three systems
have to do their work at the places where the tires
meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,
it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Enhanced Traction
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between your
vehicle and others is important.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet,
dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, this warning light
on the instrument panel will
come on briefly when you
start your vehicle.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic.
This is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time
to cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to
drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that your
brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
anti-lock brakes, it is different. See Anti-Lock Brake
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
If you have anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at
the same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock
brakes, your first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard
and hold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.
Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle
cannot respond to your steering. Momentum will carry
it in whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the
very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction
System (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially
useful in slippery road conditions. The system operates
only if it senses that one or both of the front wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When
this happens, the system reduces engine power and
may also upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
If you do not have anti-lock brakes, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this
by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing
pressure.
A LOW TRACTION message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) when the traction control
system is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Enhanced
Traction System begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-10.
The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come
on for the following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by moving the shift lever
to FIRST (1), the warning light will come on and
stay on. To turn the system back on, move the shift
lever back to a position other than FIRST (1).
The warning light should go off.
When the system is on,
this warning light will come
on to let you know there’s
a problem.
• The warning light will come on when you set your
parking brake with the engine running, and it will
stay on if your parking brake does not release fully.
If the transaxle shift lever is in any position other
than FIRST (1) and the warning light stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means
there is a problem with the system.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on when you’re
driving, there may be a problem with your Enhanced
Traction System and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of time when the
transaxle shift lever is in any position other than
FIRST (1), your vehicle needs service.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3 for more information.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Tips
Limited-Slip Differential
Your vehicle may have this feature. A limited-slip
transaxle can give you additional traction on snow, mud,
ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard transaxle
most of the time, but when one of the front wheels loses
traction, this feature will allow the wheel with traction
to move the vehicle.
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when you
turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia will
keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If you have
ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the power
steering assist system will continue to operate until you
are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power steering
assist because the electric power steering system is not
functioning, you can steer, but it will take more effort.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time,
you may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist
should return shortly after a few normal steering
movements.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems and/or the POWER STEERING message
comes on, contact your dealer for service repairs.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the road
and make you lose control. See Enhanced Traction
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around the
problem.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you have
anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock your wheels.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending on the
space available.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will
have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping back.
And if something happens to cause you to cancel
your pass, you need only slow down and drop back
again and wait for another opportunity.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane
or a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in
your inside mirror, activate your right lane change
signal and move back into the right lane. Remember
that your passenger side outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
your wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering
skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the
acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to
a lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS),
remember: It helps to avoid only the acceleration skid.
If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System,
or if the system is off, then an acceleration skid is
also best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do
not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the wheels
are no longer rolling, release enough pressure on the
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so much road
ahead.
Racing or Other Competitive Driving
See your warranty book before using your vehicle for
racing or other competitive driving. After reviewing your
warranty book, please see the GM Performance Parts
website or catalog and contact the race sanctioning
bodies, for example Sports Car Club of America (SCCA)
or Grand American, for parts and equipment required
for racing or other competitive driving.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Driving at Night
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver who
does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the glare
from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of
a roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while you
are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even
people walking.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build
up under your tires that they can actually ride on
the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle
is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace your
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield, or when
strips of rubber start to separate from the inserts.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections from
trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops
dimple the water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
{CAUTION:
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Through Flowing Water
City Driving
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
on page 5-54.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Freeway Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for
a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the other drivers are driving. Too-fast
or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check
your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often
as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense of
motion. After driving for any distance at higher speeds,
you may tend to think you are going slower than you
actually are.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and
shoes you can easily drive in.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Highway Hypnosis
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not
let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,
be aware that it can happen.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness on
the highway as an emergency.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or
cut across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have your engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car or
an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transaxle, and you can climb the
hill better.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom,
a supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth,
and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you
will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple
of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure
you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS), keep
the transaxle shift lever in AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D)
so the system will be able to improve your ability to
accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though
your vehicle has this system, you will want to slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. Under
certain conditions, you may want to turn the traction
system off, such as when driving through deep snow
and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion at lower
page 4-9.
If you do not have ETS, accelerate gently. Try not to
break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast,
the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under
the tires even more.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice can
be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
you will want to brake very gently, too. If you do
page 4-7. This system improves your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Whether you have ABS or not, you will want to begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
Without ABS, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide,
let up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down
steadily to get the most traction you can.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so hard
that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide. Brake
so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches may
appear in shaded areas where the sun cannot
reach, such as around clumps of trees, behind
buildings, or under bridges. Sometimes the surface
of a curve or an overpass may remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch
of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it.
Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice,
and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.
This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps
the battery charged. You will need a well-charged
battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling
later on with your headlamps. Let the heater run for
a while.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to spin
your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking can
help you get out when you are stuck, but you must
use caution.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine again
and repeat this only when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. But do it as little as possible. Preserve
the fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, you can
get out of the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous
exercises every half hour or so until help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others could be injured.
And, the transaxle or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When you
are stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible.
Do not spin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift back
and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward gear,
or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that does not get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see
“Certification Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label either
attached above the door lock post for a two door vehicle
or below the door lock post for a four door vehicle.
The tire and loading information label shows the number
of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount
of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle) on page 4-46
for important information on towing a trailer,
towing safety rules, and trailering tips.
Example 1
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Item
Total
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Do not carry more than 141 lbs (64 kg) in your
vehicle’s trunk. See “Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit” earlier in this section.
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
A vehicle specific Certification label, found on the rear
edge of the driver’s door, tells you the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
{CAUTION:
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle. In a
trunk, put them as far forward as you can.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Dinghy Towing
You may dinghy tow your vehicle from the front following
these steps:
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long trip,
you will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared
to be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-22.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC to unlock the
steering wheel.
3. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Release the parking brake.
To prevent the battery from draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove the following fuse from the floor
console fuse block: 8 (Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+).
more information.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember to reinstall the fuse once you have reached
your destination.
Dolly Towing
Your vehicle cannot be dolly towed, but can be dinghy
towed. See “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
Notice: Dinghy towing your vehicle may cause
damage because of reduced ground clearance.
Always tow your vehicle using the dinghy towing
procedure listed in this section or put your vehicle
on a flatbed truck.
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed
from the rear.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. Trailering is different than
just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer
(Automatic Transaxle)
{CAUTION:
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine is
required to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. Also, the trailer
adds considerably to wind resistance, increasing the
pulling requirements.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. If your vehicle is
not equipped as stated above, do not tow a trailer.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig.
For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle, and
the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section
for more information.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
your engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in
at the heavier loads.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
• Do not tow when the outside air temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
• Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km)
per year.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers, or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you
tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the GVW
because your vehicle will be carrying that weight, too.
information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight of
the trailer tongue.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
Safety Chains
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or
other bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to the
bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you do not seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-31. Dirt and water can also enter
the vehicle.
Trailer Brakes
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly. Do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake
system. If you do, both brake systems will not work well,
or at all.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require heavy
braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle
is a good deal longer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making Turns
Driving on Grades
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher than
normal engine and transaxle temperatures may
result and damage your vehicle. Frequent stops are
very important to allow the engine and transaxle
to cool.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the indicator
is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning to reduce
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
Parking on Hills
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P) for
an automatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) for
a manual transaxle.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is
how to do it:
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle, or into
gear for a manual transaxle. When parking uphill,
turn your wheels away from the curb. When parking
downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
page 6-4 for more on this. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are transaxle fluid (do not
overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling system and
brake system.
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-29.
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle)
Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped with a
manual transaxle. If you have the Cobalt SS, you can
tow a trailer. See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for more
information.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you are trailering,
it is a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual, see
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane
Your Vehicle
If your vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine (VIN Code F),
use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside
of your vehicle.
Fuel
If your vehicle has the 2.4L L4 engine (VIN Code B) or
the 2.0L Supercharged engine (VIN Code P), use
premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating
of 91 or higher. You may also use regular unleaded
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s
acceleration may be slightly reduced, and you may
notice a slight audible knocking noise, commonly
referred to as spark knock. If the octane is less than 87,
you may notice a heavy knocking noise when you drive.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or
higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might
damage your engine. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, your
engine needs service.
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Specifications
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
In most cases, you should not have to add anything
to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain only
the minimum amount of additive required to meet
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if
your vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors
or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has
additives that will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
for additional information.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance may be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on and your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must
not be used in vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for
low emissions may contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club,
or contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-40 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-32.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following.
1. Pull the interior hood
release lever with this
symbol on it. It is
located under the
instrument panel on
the driver’s side of the
vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release lever to the left. It is
located under the front center of the hood toward
the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, a gas strut
will automatically take over to lift and hold the hood
in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lower the hood until the lifting force
of the strut is reduced, then release the hood to
latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is closed
and repeat the process if necessary.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 5-40.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
on page 5-40.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
page 5-31.
D. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
on page 5-23.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 Supercharged engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
E. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
on page 5-23.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
page 5-40.
on page 5-40.
page 5-31.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, you will
need to add at least one quart/liter of oil. But you must
use the right kind. This section explains what kind of
oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
2.2L L4 Engine and
2.4L L4 Engine
2.0L L4 Supercharged
Engine
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range, your
engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• SAE 5W-30
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
For Vehicles With the 2.2L or 2.4L
L4 Engine
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting
GM Standard GM6094M. You should look for and
use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
For Vehicles with the 2.0L L4
Supercharged Engine Only
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M, such as Mobil 1® or
equivalent. Oils meeting this standard may be
identified as synthetic. However, not all synthetic oils
will meet this GM standard. You should look for and
use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
synthetic oil which meets all requirements for your
vehicle.
• SAE 5W-30
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Engine Oil Additives
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards are
all you will need for good performance and engine
protection.
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on,
reset the system.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will come on. See DIC
oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under
the best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate
that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer has GM-trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset
the system. It is also important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset
as follows:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the information and reset buttons on the DIC
at the same time to enter the personalization menu.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes until the
DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell you
the system has been reset.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
5. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the reset procedure.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter
at each engine oil change.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
2.2L and 2.4L L4 Engines
There is a special procedure for inspecting and replacing
the filter. Because this procedure is difficult, you
should have it done at your dealer service department.
Contact your dealer for additional information, or the
procedure can be found in the service manual. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose dust
and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily
get into your engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner/filter in place when you are
driving.
To inspect or replace the filter, remove the screws that
hold the cover on and lift off the cover. Be sure to
reinstall the cover tightly.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take your vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. This system does not have its own
reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
to use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transaxle fluid listed in
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first,
if you add only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
page 5-29.
Manual Transaxle Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
page 6-12 for the proper fluid to use.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
{CAUTION:
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 25,000 miles (41 500 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could
damage your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture
of the engine coolant listed in this manual for
the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
COLD FILL line.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
more information on location.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
Checking Intercooler System Coolant
(2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine Only)
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank, but only
when the engine is cool. If the coolant surge tank is
empty, a special fill procedure is necessary. See Engine
Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
The intercooler system fill neck is located in the front
of the engine compartment, near the center of the
page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant to the Intercooler System
Fill Neck
{CAUTION:
If coolant is not visible in the fill neck, add a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the fill neck, but be sure that the cooling
system, including the fill neck pressure cap, is cool
before you do so.
Turning the fill neck pressure cap when the
engine and intercooler are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out and
burn you badly. Never turn the fill neck
pressure cap — even a little — when the
engine and intercooler are hot.
{CAUTION:
Park your vehicle on a level surface and turn off the
engine. When the engine is cold, the coolant level
should be visible within the horizontal tube section of
the fill neck. When the engine is warm, the coolant level
could be as high as the FULL HOT line on the fill
neck, or a little higher.
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the
intercooler system pressure cap — even a
little — they can come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the intercooler system,
including the intercooler system pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the intercooler system and
intercooler system pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn the pressure cap.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. You can remove the fill neck pressure cap when
the intercooler system, including the upper
{CAUTION:
intercooler hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise about one-quarter of
a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
will allow any remaining pressure to be vented.
Adding only plain water to your intercooler
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some
other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. With plain water or
the wrong mixture, your engine could get too
hot. Your engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the
fill neck, until there is coolant visible in the horizontal
tube section of the fill neck.
4. With the fill neck pressure cap off, start the engine
and let it run for at least 30 seconds. Watch out
for the engine cooling fan. Turn the engine off.
By this time, the coolant level inside the fill neck
may be lower. If the level drops so that coolant is no
longer visible in the horizontal tube section of the
fill neck, add more of the DEX-COOL®
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, intercooler, and other parts. Use the
recommended coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.
coolant mixture to the fill neck until the level is
again visible in the horizontal tube section.
{CAUTION:
5. Replace the intercooler system pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully
seated.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
If the coolant is not at the proper level when the
system cools down again, see your dealer.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
information on location.
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature warning
light on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine
more information.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the engine coolant temperature warning with
no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn it off.
An engine coolant temperature warning can indicate
a serious problem. See Engine Coolant Temperature
2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
If you get an engine coolant temperature warning, but
see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when you:
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still have
the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out
of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Intercooler System Pressure Cap
C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
2.2L L4 Engine shown, 2.4L L4 Engine similar
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
{CAUTION:
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 2.2L or 2.4L
L4 engine and there seems to be no leak, with the
engine on, check to see if the electric engine cooling
fan is running. If the engine is overheating, the fan
should be running. If it is not, your vehicle needs service.
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line.
If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or
in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump, or somewhere in the cooling system.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 2.0L L4 Supercharged
engine and there seems to be no leak, with the engine
on, check to see if the electric engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, the fans should be
running. If they are not, your vehicle needs service.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2L and 2.4L L4 Engines
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, add
coolant as follows:
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
{CAUTION:
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at the COLD FILL
line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed.Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water,
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose,
is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about two or two and one-half
turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
will allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the COLD FILL line, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer, if necessary.
2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, you will
need to either see your dealer or refer to the Dealer
Service Manual for a special coolant service fill
procedure to ensure enough coolant is added.
To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the COLD FILL line on the tank. Wait about
five minutes, then check to see if the level is below
the COLD FILL line. If the level is below the line,
add additional coolant to bring the level up to
the line. Repeat this procedure until the level
remains constant at the COLD FILL line for at least
five minutes.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Washer Fluid
Brakes
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
and, on manual transaxle
vehicles, the hydraulic
clutch use the same
reservoir. The reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
Notice:
page 5-12 for the location
of the reservoir.
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake and/or clutch hydraulic system.
If it is, you should have your brake and/or clutch
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later
your brakes and/or clutch will not work well, or will
not work at all.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake/clutch
fluid. Adding fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your brake linings are worn, then you will have
too much fluid when you get new brake linings.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
You should add or remove fluid, as necessary, only
when work is done on the brake/clutch hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your
brake/clutch system, your brakes/clutch may
not work well, or they may not even work at
all. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
and/or clutch hydraulic system.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake/clutch system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake/clutch hydraulic system can
damage brake/clutch system parts so badly
that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
What to Add
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-12.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and may have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound may
come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the brake
pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
If your vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have
wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake
rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected
immediately. Also, the rear brake drums should be
removed and inspected each time the tires are removed
for rotation or changing. When you have the front brake
pads replaced, have the rear brakes inspected, too.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakes will not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Brake Adjustment
Battery
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your
disc brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a
moderate or heavier stop, then your brakes might
not adjust correctly. If you drive in that way,
then — very carefully — make a few moderate brake
stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km), so your
brakes will adjust properly.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery.
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the trunk. You do not
need to access the battery to jump start your vehicle.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
If you have rear drum brakes and your brake pedal
goes down farther than normal, the rear drum brakes
may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up
and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you get
new approved GM replacement parts. If you do not,
your brakes may no longer work properly. For example,
if someone puts in brake linings that are wrong for
your vehicle, the balance between your front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can change in
many other ways if someone puts in the wrong
replacement brake parts.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
{CAUTION:
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may want to
use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start
your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do
it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located in the trunk. You will not need
to access your battery for jump starting. Your
vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a remote
negative (−) jump starting terminal.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put an
automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual
transaxle in NEUTRAL before setting the
parking brake.
The remote positive
terminal is located under
a red tethered cap on
the engine compartment
fuse block. Lift the
cap to access the
terminal.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The remote negative (−)
ground terminal, marked
GND (−), is located behind
the engine coolant
{CAUTION:
surge tank.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
for more information on the location of the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on your
vehicle.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle with
the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the
dead battery because this can cause sparks.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its original
position.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment
However, If the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may
be necessary.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be re-aimed.
It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps as
described in the following procedure.
The vertical headlamp aiming screws are located under
the hood near the headlamps.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall
or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or
mud on it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on
the driver’s seat.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
socket wrench.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps, do the
following:
1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam lamp.
4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on the lamp. Record the distance.
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of
the vehicle.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
5. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. The top
edge of the cut-off should be positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the opposite headlamp.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
for more information.
A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
B. Sidemarker
C. Headlamp
2. Remove the two hex bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the two plastic fasteners from the fascia.
4. Pull the front fascia back.
You may need someone else to assist you with
Steps 3 and 4.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the headlamp assembly up on an angle and
towards the radiator to remove.
11. Reinstall the bulb assembly by reversing
Steps 1 through 8.
When reinstalling the headlamp assembly, first
ensure that the wiring harness is in its original
position. If not, the headlamp assembly will not fit
correctly.
6. Disconnect the bulb base from the wiring harness
by lifting the plastic locking tab.
7. To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:
7.1. Disconnect the wiring harness from the
bulb socket.
You will also need to line up the two tabs on the
bottom of the assembly that fit into two slots in the
headlamp assembly bracket.
7.2. Remove the black retainer by turning it
counterclockwise.
8. Turn the bulb socket for the headlamp, front turn
signal or parking lamp counterclockwise to remove.
For the sidemarker bulb, you will need to us a
tool to assist in turning the bulb socket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
To replace a CHMSL bulb, do the following:
9. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
10. Install a new bulb.
information.
2. Locate the CHMSL bulb assembly in the trunk lid.
3. Depress the plastic tabs to release the bulb
assembly.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps and Turn Signal
Lamps (Coupe)
To replace a taillamp or rear turn signal bulb, do the
following:
4. Pull the bulb assembly down to access the bulbs.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
6. Install a new bulb.
information.
2. Remove the fastener which holds down the
trunk trim.
7. Align the tabs in the bulb assembly with the
assembly in the trunk lid. Push the bulb assembly
back into place until it snaps in. You may need
to use the tool to guide the tabs into the assembly.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up on the
tab to release and pull it straight out.
4. Remove the taillamp bulb socket from the assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
6. Install a new bulb.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps (Sedan)
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
information.
2. Remove the fastener which holds down the trunk
trim. Once you have removed the trim, there will
be one more fastener to remove.
A. Sidemarker
B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal/Taillamp
C. Back-up
3. Remove the outer two screws from the taillamp
assembly.
6. Locate the bulb you wish to change
4. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up on the
tab to release and pull it straight out.
7. Remove the taillamp bulb socket from the assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Remove the taillamp from the quarter panel.
8. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
9. Install a new bulb.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Back-Up Lamps
To replace a back-up lamp bulb, do the following:
information.
2. Locate the back-up lamp bulb assembly in the
trunk lid.
3. Remove the bulb socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
On vehicles that have a back-up lamp cover, first
remove it by depressing the tab at the top.
4. Pull out the old bulb.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb socket by aligning the tabs and
turning it clockwise to secure.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
page 6-14. Here is how to remove the wiper blades:
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Back-Up Lamps
Bulb Number
921
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
912
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
Halogen Headlamps,
High/Low-Beam
3157KX
9007 LL
194
Sidemarker
Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn
Signal Lamps
3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information on wiper blade inspection.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s owner manual.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For cold weather driving conditions, you may prefer to
get tires designed for snow or ice. See your dealer for
details regarding winter tire availability and proper tire
Low-Profile Performance Tire
If your vehicle has 215/45R18 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These tires
are designed for very responsive driving on wet or
dry pavement. You may also notice more road noise
with low-profile performance tires and that they tend to
wear faster.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, load range,
and speed rating as your original equipment tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road hazards
or curb impact than standard profile tires. Tire
and/or wheel assembly damage can occur when
coming into contact with road hazards like,
potholes, or sharp edged objects, or when sliding
into a curb. Your GM warranty does not cover
this type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and other road hazards.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines. If your vehicle has 205/55R16 size tires,
they meet the GM TPC Spec rating, but the TPC Spec
code has not been molded onto the tire’s sidewall.
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN
shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto
both sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire has
lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
The speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association. A tire size without the letter P
as the first character is certified to European standards.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 60 percent as high as it is wide.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor vehicle
with standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
• Unusual wear
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door latch.
This label lists your vehicle’s original equipment tires
and their recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown
on the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure
needed to support your vehicle’s maximum load carrying
capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire and
loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31. How you load your vehicle affects vehicle
handling and ride comfort, never load your vehicle
with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Check
High Speed Operation
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget
to check the compact spare tire, it should be at
60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information regarding
the compact spare tire, see Compact Spare Tire
on page 5-83.
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold.
Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
If your vehicle has 215/45R18 size tires, set the cold tire
inflation pressure to 35 psi (241 kPa) for the front and
rear tires, when operating your vehicle under high-speed
conditions. When you end high-speed driving return the
tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the tire
and loading information label.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and
moisture.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-68 for more information.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-71.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your
vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
One way to tell when
it is time for new tires
is to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your
tires have only
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire
manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS
page 5-56 for additional information.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire size 205/55R16 91 H, used on some vehicles, meets
the General Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) rating, but the TPC Spec code
has not been molded onto the tire’s sidewall. If your
vehicle has these tires, and you need to replace them,
you can still get these TPC Spec rated tires by asking
your GM dealer. Your GM dealer can order these tires by
part number. This way, your vehicle will continue to give
the proper endurance, handling, traction, and ride as the
original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands, or types may also cause
damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the
correct size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
developed for use on your vehicle. See
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as, antilock brakes; traction
control; and electronic stability control, the performance
of these systems can be affected.
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle
may not provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. This label
is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).
information about the Tire and Loading Information
Label and its location on your vehicle.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if you
notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to be
checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels may
need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper
diagnosis.
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Wheel Replacement
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
or excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be
sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel
nuts for your vehicle.
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
205/55R16, P205/55R16, P205/50R17 or 215/45R18
size tires, use tire chains only where legal and only
when you must. Use only SAE Class S-type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them on
the front tires and tighten them as tightly as
possible with the ends securely fastened. Drive
slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too
fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
damage your vehicle.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has 205/55R16, P205/55R16,
P205/50R17 or 215/45R18 size tires, do not use
tire chains. There is not enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination, and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
{CAUTION:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as
a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The equipment you will need is located in the trunk.
Base Models
information.
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire
and tools.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Spare Tire
D. Wing Nut
E. Jack and Wheel Wrench
F. Bolt
3. Remove the retainer (B) that holds down the spare
4. Remove the spare tire (C) by placing your hands at
the four and eight o’clock positions. Gently pull it up
and out of the trunk.
5. Remove the wing nut (D) that holds the jack and
remove the jack and wheel wrench (E).
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uplevel Models
information.
2. Lift the trunk liner to access the spare tire
and tools.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Retainer
B. Jack and Wheel Wrench
C. Spare Tire
D. Foam Support
E. Bolt
3. Remove the retainer (A) that holds down the jack,
wheel wrench (B) and spare tire (C).
4. Remove the spare tire by placing your hands at the
four and eight o’clock positions. Gently pull it up
and out of the trunk.
You will need to turn the plastic wheel nut
counterclockwise to loosen the wheel wrench from
the jack.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A) and
wheel wrench (B).
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Press the button and then pull on the end of the wheel
wrench to extend the handle.
1. If your vehicle is equipped with plastic wheel
covers, use the wheel wrench to loosen the plastic
wheel nut caps.
Once you have loosened the plastic wheel nut caps
with the wheel wrench, you can finish loosening
them with your fingers. The plastic nut caps do not
come off.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along
the edge of the wheel cover until it comes off.
If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, first remove
the center cap with your finger or the wheel wrench.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Do not remove them yet.
5. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the vehicle’s
frame, where the notch is located, nearest the
flat tire.
6. Put the compact spare tire near you.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
4. Position the jack lift head at the jack location
nearest the flat tire. The front location is about
8 inches (20 cm) rearward from the front wheel
opening. The rear location is about 4 inches (10 cm)
forward of the rear wheel opening.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
8. Remove all of the
wheel nuts.
and spare wheel.
10. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose. Your
wheel could fall off, causing a serious
accident.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
11. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
4-Wheel Nuts
5-Wheel Nuts
13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Jack and Wheel Wrench
D. Stow Bolt Extension
E. Spare Tire
F. Bolt
Base Model
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Cover
B. Retainer
C. Jack and Wheel Wrench
D. Stow Bolt Extension
E. Spare Tire
F. Foam Support
G. Bolt
To store a flat or spare tire and tools, do the following:
1. Remove the stow bolt extension rod and sleeve
from the jack.
2. Re-attach the wheel wrench to the jack.
3. Place the flat tire face down into the spare tire hub.
Avoid scraping the aluminum wheel, if equipped,
on the hold-down bolt.
4. Screw the stow bolt extension rod and the sleeve
into the existing spare tire hold-down bolt.
5. Place the jack into the center of the flat tire, being
careful not to scratch the inside of the wheel.
6. Place the smaller jack hold-down nut in a safe
place for use when you put the compact spare
tire back into the trunk.
7. Remove the plastic sleeve from the stow bolt
extension rod. Secure the jack and road wheel
using the larger plastic retainer.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon
as possible.
Uplevel Model
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
Compact Spare Tire
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can
damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles
from your upholstery. It is important to keep your
upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. Your
vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of heat
that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental
over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage your interior and does not improve the
effectiveness of soil removal.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test
a small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring
formation may result, clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For soils, always
try to remove them first with plain water or club soda.
Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following techniques:
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel
until no more can be removed.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and
then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of your
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because they
can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Washing Your Vehicle
Finish Care
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle
by hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can
be obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed
to dry on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-87.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. To help keep the paint finish looking new, keep
the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever possible.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass cleaning
liquid or powder and water solution. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed with water.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM dealer’s
body and paint shop.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underbody Maintenance
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Usage
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
Usage
Vehicle Identification
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Swirl Remover Polish
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Wash Wax Concentrate
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Spot Lifter
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Odor Eliminator
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Electrical System
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label in the trunk, on the driver side,
near the spare tire cover. It is very helpful if you ever
need to order parts. On this label, you will find the
following:
• VIN
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Should your
headlamps fail to function, have your headlamp system
checked right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle that
you can get along without — like the radio or cigarette
lighter — and use its fuse if it is the correct amperage.
Replace it as soon as you can.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the floor
console fuse block and the engine compartment
fuse block.
Fuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.
When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opens
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Floor Console Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
5
Fuse Puller
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
The floor console fuse block is located on the
passenger’s side of the floor console under the
instrument panel. To access the fuse block, remove
the panel on the side of the console.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
22
23
Usage
6
7
8
9
Amplifier
Cluster
Empty
Audio System
Ignition Switch, PASS-Key® III+
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
(Airbag)
Engine Control Module,
Transmission Control Module
24
25
Stoplamp
Heating, Ventilation, Air
10
Conditioning, PASS-Key® III+
26
27
28
29
Door Locks
Interior Lights
Empty
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Empty
Spare
Airbag
Spare
Power Windows
Windshield Wiper
Climate Control System, Cluster
Relays
30
31
Usage
Climate Control System
Empty
Empty
Empty
Electric Power Steering, Steering
Wheel Control
32
Retained Accessory Power
19
20
21
Sunroof
Spare
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
SPARES
Blank
Blank
RDFG
COOL/FAN2
CRNK
COOL/FAN 1
BCM3
BCM2
FOG LP
HORN
Usage
Fuses
Blank
INJ
Blank
ABS
Usage
Spares
Not Used
Injectors
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Rear Defogger
Cooling Fan 2
Starter
Anti-lock Brake System
Powertrain Control Module/Engine
Control Module
Electric Power Steering
Air Pump
PCM/ECM
EPS
Engine Cooling Fan
Body Control Module 3
Body Control Module 2
Fog Lamps
AIR PMP
PRK LPS
WPR
Park Lamps
Windshield Wiper
Ignition
IP IGN
Horn
A/C CLTCH
AIR SOL
ABS2
Air Conditioning Clutch
Air Solenoid
Anti-lock Brake System 2
Park, Neutral
Engine Control Module,
Transmission
Back-Up Lamps
RH HI BEAM
LH HI BEAM
RH LO BEAM
LH LO BEAM
Blank
Passenger’s Side High Beam
Driver’s Side High Beam
Passenger’s Side Low Beam
Driver’s Side Low Beam
Not Used
PRK/NEUT
ECM/TRANS
FUEL PMP
EMISN
Fuel Pump
Emissions
BCK UP
TRUNK/
OUTLET
Trunk, Accessory Power Outlet
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Blank
Blank
S BAND/
ONSTAR
Blank
LTR
MIR (S)
HTD SEATS
Usage
Relays
RDFG
COOL/FAN2
WPR2
Usage
Not Used
Not Used
Rear Defogger
Cooling Fan 2
Windshield Wiper 2
Starter
Audio, OnStar®
CRNK
Not Used
COOL/FAN1
FUEL PUMP
WPR1
PWR/TRN
AIR PMP
A/C CLTCH
AIR SOL
Cooling Fan 1
Fuel Pump
Cigarette Lighter
Mirrors
Windshield Wiper 1
Powertrain
Heated Seats
CNSTR VENT Canister Vent
Air Pump
Air Conditioning Clutch
Air Solenoid
RUN/CRNK
Run, Crank
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cobalt SS 2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
Fuses
SPARES
Blank
Blank
Usage
Fuses
RDFG
COOL/FAN2
CRNK
Usage
Spares
Not Used
Not Used
Rear Defogger
Cooling Fan 2
Starter
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
COOL/FAN 1
BCM3
BCM2
FOG LP
HORN
RH LO BEAM
LH LO BEAM
RH HI BEAM
LH HI BEAM
Blank
FUEL PMP
EMISN
Blank
Usage
Engine Cooling Fan
Body Control Module 3
Body Control Module 2
Fog Lamps
Fuses
Usage
Powertrain Control Module/Engine
Control Module
Electric Power Steering
Not Used
PCM/ECM
EPS
Blank
PRK LPS
WPR
Park Lamps
Horn
Windshield Wiper
Ignition
Air Conditioning Clutch
Aftercooler
Anti-lock Brake System
Park, Neutral
Engine Control Module,
Transmission
Passenger’s Side Low Beam
Driver’s Side Low Beam
Passenger’s Side High Beam
Driver’s Side High Beam
Not Used
Fuel Pump
Emissions
Not Used
Injectors
IP IGN
A/C CLTCH
AFTRCOOL
ABS2
PRK/NEUT
ECM/TRANS
BCK UP
TRUNK/
OUTLET
Back-Up Lamps
INJ
Blank
ABS
Trunk, Accessory Power Outlet
Not Used
Not Used
Anti-lock Brake System
Blank
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Blank
S BAND/
ONSTAR
Blank
LTR
MIR (S)
HTD SEATS
CNSTR VENT Canister Vent
Usage
Relays
RDFG
COOL/FAN2
WPR2
Usage
Not Used
Rear Defogger
Cooling Fan 2
Audio, OnStar®
Windshield Wiper 2
Starter
Not Used
CRNK
Cigarette Lighter
Mirrors
COOL/FAN1
FUEL PUMP
WPR1
COOL
SER/PAR
Cooling Fan 1
Fuel Pump
Heated Seats
Windshield Wiper 1
Series/Parallel Cooling Fan
PWR/TRN
Powertrain
A/C CLTCH
AFTRCOOL
RUN/CRNK
Air Conditioning Clutch
Aftercooler Pump
Run, Crank
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Cooling System
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
2.2L L4 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
7.4 qt
6.8 qt
7.4 qt
2.0 qt
7.0 L
6.5 L
7.0L
Intercooler System 2.0L Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
1.9 L
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
Fuel Tank
Transaxle, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill)
Transaxle, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill)
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engines
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
Wheel Nut Torque
5.0 qt
6.0 qt
13.0 gal
7.0 qt
4.7 L
5.7 L
49.2 L
6.6 L
1.7 qt
1.6 qt
100 lb ft
1.6 L
1.5 L
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in
this manual.
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
2.2L L4
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
0.042 inch (1.06 mm)
0.042 inch (1.06 mm)
0.042 inch (1.06 mm)
Automatic
Manual
F
P
B
2.0L L4 (Supercharged)
2.4L L4
Manual
Manual
Automatic
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even affect
the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid levels
or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-31.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have
the necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to
reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
should be checked, when to check it, and what you can
easily do to help keep your vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following
for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
your second service be Maintenance II, and that
you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it means
that service is required for your vehicle. See DIC
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the engine oil life
system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your
GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
GM parts and reset the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the CHANGE OIL SOON
message comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all for
one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-9.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels. If you have the
2.0L L4 supercharged engine, check intercooler fluid level. Add fluid as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (l).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid and
filter (severe service only).
See footnote (h).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect drum brake linings/shoes for wear or
cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including drums,
wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering cables for
proper hook-up, binding, cracks, chafing, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches and trunk lid hinges
and latches. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine
GM parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
Owner Checks and Services
service.
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
At Each Fuel Fill
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the proper
fluid if necessary.
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
At Least Once a Month
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
details.
Tire Inflation Check
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Tire Wear Inspection
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23 for further details.
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-63.
Intercooler Coolant Level Check
(2.0L Supercharged Engine)
Check the coolant level and add DEX-COOL® coolant
for further details.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves,
you or others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-27.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway, and try
to start the engine. The vehicle should start only
when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the
floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch is not
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• With an automatic transaxle, the ignition should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
• With a manual transaxle, the key should come out
only in LOCK.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right. It
should only lock when turned to the right.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires a
special engine oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils
meeting this standard may be
identified with the American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified
for Gasoline Engines starburst
symbol. However, not all synthetic
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Engine Oil
(2.0L L4
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Supercharged API oils with the starburst symbol
Engine oil which meets
engine)
will meet this GM standard. You
should look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM4718M.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the
requirements for your vehicle. For
the proper viscosity, see Engine Oil
on page 5-15.
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
Engine Oil
(2.2L and 2.4L
L4 engines)
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all
the requirements for your vehicle.
To determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
Engine Cooling water and use only DEX-COOL®
System
page 5-23.
Intercooler
System
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
(2.0L L4
Supercharged Coolant.
engine)
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
Hydraulic
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
Manual
Transaxle Shift in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Linkage
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Clutch System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Clutch Linkage
Pivot Points
Engine Oil.
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. 12377985,
Chassis Lubricant
Parking Brake
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Cable Guides
Chassis
Lubrication
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Manual
Transaxle
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Transmission Fluid. Look for
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
(2.2L and 2.4L “Approved for the H-Specification”
L4 engines)
on the label.
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor, meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and
Release Pawl
Manual
Transaxle
(2.0L L4
Supercharged
engine)
Automatic
Transaxle
Category LB or GC-LB.
Manual Transmission Fluid
(Part No. 21018899).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Hood and Door
Hinges
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Key Lock
Cylinders
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
ACDelco® Part
Part
GM Part Number
Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engine
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
Engine Oil Filter
21999324
15239447
12579143
A2956C
—
PF456G
Spark Plugs
2.2L L4 and 2.4L L4 Engine
2.0L L4 Engine Supercharged
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side — 22 inches (56 cm)
Passenger’s Side — 17 inches (43 cm)
12599232
12787099
52493319
41-981
PFR6T-10G
CF125
15243233
15243232
—
—
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre by calling
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present
mileage (kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age, mileage,
and other factors. General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs
or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to
this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a
court action, use of the program is free of charge and
your case will generally be heard within 40 days. If you
do not agree with the decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any other venue for relief
available to you.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Online Owner Center
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canada — Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance Offices
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, refer to the
addresses below.
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Overseas — Customer Assistance
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico:
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you
drive in the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’s
Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA,
(1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year to
speak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
representative.
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will be
covered at no charge if you are unable to gain entry
into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement key
will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
Courtesy Transportation
• Model, year, color, and license plate number.
To enhance your ownership experience, we and
our participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for
new vehicles.
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you and
your family. Remember, we are only a phone call away.
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872), text telephone (TTY) users, call
1-888-889-2438.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when,
in Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become
excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Transportation Options
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps to
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in the
work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses
may be available, for up to a maximum of five days.
In addition, should you arrange transportation through
a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available, up to a five-day
maximum. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs
and be supported by original receipts.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle that
you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum amount
per day and must be supported by receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state, local and rental vehicle provider
requirements. Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements, insurance coverage, credit
card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage charges
and may also be responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage or rental usage beyond the
completion of the repair.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it
is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the
General Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, alternative transportation may be available
under the Courtesy Transportation Program. Please
consult your dealer for details.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any
time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described herein
at its sole discretion.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to
engine speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle
speed, safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag
performance, and the severity of a collision. This
information has been used to improve vehicle crash
performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety. Unlike
the data recorders on many airplanes, these on-board
systems do not record sounds, such as conversation of
vehicle occupants.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,
has a number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components
to optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for
airbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provide
anti-lock braking and to help the driver control the
vehicle in difficult driving situations. Some information
may be stored during regular operations to facilitate
repair of detected malfunctions; other information is
stored only in a crash event by computer systems,
such as those commonly called event data
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
recorders (EDR).
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
• use the data for GM research needs,
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Collision Parts
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access
to the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device that
stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or
manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to assure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts
may fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform properly in subsequent
collisions. Aftermarket parts are not covered by your
GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by
that warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your
GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs
by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you
assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
If an Accident Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are
all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no
one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the
accident. This will help guard against post-accident
legal action.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for a
police report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a
copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some states
with “no fault” insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists
in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
General Motors. Please call the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
In Canada, information pertaining to Product
Service Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your
General Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Owner’s Information
Service Manuals
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Or you can write to:
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ......................... 3-49
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-49
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
Easy Entry Seat ............................................... 1-7
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-17
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-14
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats (cont.)
S
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-61
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
